‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪Model No. : IM008‬‬‫ﺷﻜﺮًﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷ ﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗ ﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏ ﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣ ﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪33 .... (SCN‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪33 .........................‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪14‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪37 ......................................(Z‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪37 ............................AP‬‬‫]‪ :[Live Composite‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪38 .........................................‬‬‫]‪ :[Live Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪39 ...........................‬‬‫]‪ :[Multiple Exposure‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪40 .................‬‬‫]‪ :[HDR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪41 ..........................................HDR‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]]♥[‪42 ........................... [Silent‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪43 ..........................‬‬‫]‪44 ........ [Keystone Compensation‬‬‫]‪ :[AE Bracketing‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪45 ..............‬‬‫]‪ :[Focus Bracketing‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪46 ......‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪14 .....................‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ‪15 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪17 ......................................‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪17 ..................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪18 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪20 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪21 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ‪/‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ‪23 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪24 ...............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪26 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪27 ...........‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪27 ........................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ‪29 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ( ‪30 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪31 ..................................(AUTO‬‬‫‪AR 2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪47 ......(ART‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪48 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪49 .......... [Partial Color‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ‪50 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ‪51 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪52 .....‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ‪53 ............................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪56 .......‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪57 .......‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪58 ....................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪59 ...........................‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪60 ......................................‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪62 .....................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪62 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪62 ......................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪63 ..................My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ "‪63 ........................."My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪65 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪65 ......‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪66 ........‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪68 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫)‪68 ...........................(Exposure F‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪Digital Tele-‬‬‫‪68 ................................. (converter‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪69 ........................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪69 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪70 ..........................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬‫)‪54 ...................... (BULB/LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮ ّﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪55 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪71 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪73 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪74 ....................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪76 ...... (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 ................. (ISO) ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪) WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ((‪78 ........‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )‪79 ......... (AF Mode‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪81 ...........‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫‪81 ..................................... (KK‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬‫‪82 ...................................... (nK‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪85 ......................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪86 .........................................‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪87 ........‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪88 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‪89 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬‫)‪89 ..............................(Sharpness‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬‫)‪90 ................................. (Contrast‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫)‪90 ...............................(Saturation‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫)‪91 ............................... (Gradation‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪91 .......................(Color Filter‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫)‪92 ................ (Monochrome Color‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪92 .... (Effect) i-Enhance‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪Color‬‬‫‪93 ...................................... (Space‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫)‪94 ..... (Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪95 ......................(Button Function‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪107 ..........................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪107 .......................‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪107 .........‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪108 ......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪108 ......................................‬‬‫‪98‬‬‫‪109‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪98 .................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪98 ......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪99 .......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪100 ..........‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪101 ..............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪101 ........................‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪103 ...............................‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪103 ................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪103 ..................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ )‪Share‬‬‫‪104 ..................................... (Order‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪104 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪،Erase Selected ،0‬‬‫‪104 ........... (Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪105 ..............................‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪105 ...............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪105 ......................... My Clips‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪106 ........My Clips‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪106 ....... My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪106 ......................‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪109 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪110 ...................... Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫)‪110 ....................................(Reset‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪111 .... (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪Digital Tele-‬‬‫‪111 ............................... (converter‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ )‪111 ..............(AF Illuminator‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ )‪KElec. Zoom‬‬‫‪112 ....................................(Speed‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬‫)‪112 .......... (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫)‪113 .......................... (#RC Mode‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪119 ..........................‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪120 ............(Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪120 .... (Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ )‪120 .......................... (W‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪121 .....................‬‬‫‪121 ............................... AF/MF a‬‬‫‪121 ....................... Button/Dial M‬‬‫‪122 ...................... Disp/8/PC N‬‬‫‪122 ....................... Disp/8/PC O‬‬‫‪123 .................. Exp/ISO/BULB P‬‬‫‪123 .................. Exp/ISO/BULB Q‬‬‫‪124 ......................... # Custom b‬‬‫‪124 ....................K/WB/Color W‬‬‫‪125 .............................. Record X‬‬‫‪126 ........................... K Utility c‬‬‫‪127 ................................. AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪127 ................................MF Assist‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪128 ...................‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪132‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪133 .........‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪134 ..............‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪114 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪115 ..................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻔﺔ )‪115 ................(R‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪115 .............. (Edit‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪In-Movie‬‬‫‪117 ...................... (Image Capture‬‬‫ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪118 ... (Movie Trimming‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪118 ............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪130 .........‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪131 .......‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪131 .......................................‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪136 .....................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪136 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪137 ........‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪137 ............‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪138 ................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ‪138 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪139 .........................................‬‬‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪140‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪140 ................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪140 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪141 .........................‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪OLYMPUS Digital Camera‬‬‫‪141 ......................................Updater‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪141 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪142 .......... (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪144 ...............................‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪145 ........................ (DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪145 .............................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪146 ..................................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪153 ..............‬‬‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪154 ....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪156 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪156 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪156 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪156 ........................................‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪157 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪158‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪158 .................‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪162 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪165 ...........................‬‬‫‪147‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪169 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪147 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪172‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪148 .........‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪172 .................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪148 ............................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪149 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪150 .........................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪151 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪151 .............‬‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪178‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(B) AUTO‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫‪66‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻧﻴﻘﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪47‬‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪(SCN) Portrait + Nightscape‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫‪(SCN) Nightscape‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪(SCN) Hand-Held Starlight‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪(SCN) Fireworks‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪(Z) Live Time‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫‪(Z) Live Composite‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪(M) Live Composite‬‬‫‪55‬‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ )‪(M‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪(SCN) Light Trails‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪(Z) Live Time‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫‪(Z) Live Composite‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪(M) Live Composite‬‬‫‪55‬‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ )‪(M‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪68‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪71‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪77‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪87‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪73‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪(SCN) Backlight HDR‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫‪91‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪89‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪73‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫‪73‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪81‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ً‬‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪76‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪78‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪76‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫‪47‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪52‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬‫‪56‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪69‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪97‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪97‬‬‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪) C-AF+TR‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪80‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬‫‪My Clips‬‬‫‪62‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺨﺎﺕ(‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫‪123‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪119‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫‪122‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫‪122‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫‪126‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪71‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫]♥[‪(SCN) Silent‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫]♥[‪(Z) Silent‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪68‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪66‬‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Portrait‬‬‫‪76‬‬‫‪(Picture Mode) e-Portrait‬‬‫‪76‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫‪122‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪130‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫‪102‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Shadow Adj‬‬‫‪116‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Redeye Fix‬‬‫‪116‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪145‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫‪142‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪136‬‬‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪136‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪137‬‬‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪81‬‬‫‪137‬‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪120‬‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫‪122‬‬‫]♥[‪(SCN) Silent‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫]♥[‪(Z) Silent‬‬‫‪42‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪%‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪HIGF‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )ﺹ‪.(13 .‬‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪9‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪i‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪27 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺭ ‪ .................................. ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(P‬‬‫‪..........................‬ﺹ‪100 ،71 ،68 ،53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪/73 .‬ﺹ‪111 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪18 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻏﻄﺎء ‪Hot shoe‬‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪ ...............‬ﺹ‪116 ،114 ،105 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪19 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ d‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫‪ e‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪17 ،15 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .....‬ﺹ‪17 ،15 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫‪ h‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ‪ ........................... HDMI‬ﺹ‪130 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪142 ،140 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) F‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ‪) F /‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( )ﺹ‪(68 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪) I‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ‪) # /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(71 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪) H‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪) N /‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ( )ﺹ‪(69 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Q‬ﺹ‪(100 ،74 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪) G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ‪jY /‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( )ﺹ‪(73 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ(‬‫‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪107 ،98 ،74 ،56 ،24 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪151 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ‪) u‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ(‪ .......... G/‬ﺹ‪/30 .‬ﺹ‪101 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ....................a/Fn‬ﺹ‪/95 .‬ﺹ‪101 ،68 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺯﺭ ‪) R‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ....................h/‬ﺹ‪/57 .‬ﺹ‪104 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ...................................MENU‬ﺹ‪109 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺯﺭ ‪......................... INFO‬ﺹ‪128 ،99 ،26 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺯﺭ ‪ .....................................Q‬ﺹ‪100 ،74 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ* )‪(HIGF‬‬‫‪................................‬ﺹ‪100 ،73 – 69 ،21 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺯﺭ ‪) q‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪100 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺯﺭ ‪) ‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪103 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪ HIGF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫)‪(Basic Manual‬‬‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ً‬‫‪AR 14‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB12‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪(C‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪30‬‬‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪BLS-50‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(171 ،14 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ‪.(24 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ" )ﺹ‪.(147 .‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ SD :‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ SDXC‬ﻭ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪) "(Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(120 .‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪ (148 .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﱢ‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(148 .‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ً‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(24 .‬‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‬‫)ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪.(3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪AR 18‬‬‫‪‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪.(150 .‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) j‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪) k‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪) l‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪) m‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪) [Sleep] v .‬ﺹ‪(126 .‬‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬‫ﻭﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪HIGF‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Please select your language.‬‬‫‪Veuillez choisir votre langue.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.‬‬‫‪Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ‬‬‫\‪ýHVN‬‬‫‪Hrvatski‬‬‫‪Nederlands‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪Dansk‬‬‫‪Français‬‬‫‪Suomi‬‬‫‪Eesti‬‬‫‪ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ‬‬‫‪Deutsch‬‬‫‪0DJ\DU‬‬‫‪Italiano‬‬‫‪/LHWXYLǐN‬‬‫‪Latviski‬‬‫)‪Português(Pt‬‬‫‪Polski‬‬‫‪Indonesia‬‬‫‪Norsk‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Srpski‬‬‫‪Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ‬‬‫‪6ORYHQãþLQD‬‬‫‪Slovensky‬‬‫‪Svenska‬‬‫‪ɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ‬‬‫‪Romanian‬‬‫‪Español‬‬‫‪Türkçe‬‬‫‪Viet Nam‬‬‫‪Setare‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﺳﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪" v .e‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫)‪) "(W‬ﺹ‪(120 .‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ‬‬‫\‪ýHVN‬‬‫‪Hrvatski‬‬‫‪Nederlands‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪Dansk‬‬‫‪Français‬‬‫‪0DJ\DU‬‬‫‪Suomi‬‬‫‪Eesti‬‬‫‪ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ‬‬‫‪Deutsch‬‬‫‪Italiano‬‬‫‪Indonesia‬‬‫‪/LHWXYLǐN‬‬‫‪Latviski‬‬‫)‪Português(Pt‬‬‫‪Polski‬‬‫‪Norsk‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.e‬‬‫‪) [X] v‬ﺹ‪(119 .‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Time‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪2018‬‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ُﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) [Video Frame Rate] v .‬ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 134‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Power-off Standby‬‬‫‪Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off‬‬‫‪Standby so images can be imported‬‬‫?‪while power is off‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Power-off Standby:On‬‬‫‪Confirm whether or not to activate‬‬‫‪Power-off Standby every time power‬‬‫‪is turned off? This setting can be‬‬‫‪changed from the menu anytime.‬‬‫‪Confirm every time‬‬‫‪Don't show this screen again‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬/‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ‬ً‫ ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬،‫ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﮐﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬.‫ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬1.‫ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬MENU ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬1‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬GF ‫ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬e ‫ ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬2.Q ‫ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ѯєьѬщѥҕ ѕѓѥё 1ѯєьѬшкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
1

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥдѥіҙч
X’--.--.-- --:--:-Wѳъѕs
j±0 k±0чѬѓѥёэ Ѥьъѩд
0.5 њѧьѥъѨ
дѥішкзҕѤҟ ѥWi-Fi/Bluetoothѯђѧ іҙєѰњіҙ

2

дј Ѥэ

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬HIGF ‫ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬4.Q ‫ﺯﺭ‬

11
2

дј Ѥэ

W
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

1EnglishNederlands

2

Français

Eesti

Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano

Norsk

Back

23 AR

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

ѯєьѬшкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

ýHVN\

Dansk
Deutschюѧ чp.Q ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬GF ‫[ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬W] ‫ ﻇﻠﻞ‬3

HrvatskiIndonesiaіѨѯоѶ шѱўєчѓѥё
чѧлъѧ ѤјѯъѯјзѠь
ѱўєчњ ѤчѰѝк

0DJ\DU

Latviski/LHWXYLǐN

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)

Set

дј Ѥэ

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥдѥіҙч
X’--.--.-- --:--:-Wѳъѕs
j±0 k±00.5 њѧьѥъѨ
чѬѓѥёэ Ѥьъѩд
дѥішкзҕѤҟ ѥWi-Fi/Bluetoothѯђѧ іҙєѰњіҙ
шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪b c‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫‪d e fg w‬‬‫‪jk‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪FP RC HDR‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪-A‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪m‬‬

‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪B‬‬‫‪TO‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪o AF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪p 3‬‬‫‪q N‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪L‬‬

‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪s‬‬‫‪4 5‬‬‫‪-2.0‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪t‬‬

‫‪J‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪E‬‬

‫‪+2‬‬‫‪+7‬‬‫‪1 2 3‬‬‫‪67‬‬‫‪off‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬

‫‪l‬‬

‫‪u‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪xw‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪139 – 132 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ............................. Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪126 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ...‬ﺹ‪139 – 132 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ......Bluetooth‬ﺹ‪139 – 132 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ............................. Super FP‬ﺹ‪151 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ....................................... RC‬ﺹ‪151 .‬‬‫‪ ..............................................HDR 8‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ ...............................AE Bracketing 9‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ ..........................Focus Bracketing‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ ........................Handheld Starlight 0‬ﺹ‪34 .‬‬‫‪ ...........................Multi Focus Shot a‬ﺹ‪36 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫‪ D c‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪111 .‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪112 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ّ‬‫‪ f‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪116 ،114 ،105 ،57 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .....m‬ﺹ‪163 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻀﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪ٍ :‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪111 ،76 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪77 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫‪AR 24‬‬‫‪8 9 0 a‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫‪y‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪CBAz‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪ t‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪149 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪94 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...........‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ..........‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪ x‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪ B‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ...............................................‬ﺹ‪96 .‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...........‬ﺹ‪127 ،96 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪61 – 27 .‬‬‫‪ E‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ F‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪89 .‬‬‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫‪ I‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ J‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪87 .‬‬‫‪ K‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ L‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ M‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪114 .‬‬‫‪ N‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫‪ O‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ‪ ...............‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫‪ P‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ*‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫)‪(Custom2‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫)‪(Custom1‬‬‫* ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ‪) n‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Custom1‬ﻭ‪) [LV-Info] < [G/Info Settings] v .Custom2‬ﺹ‪(122 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﻘﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬‫ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻷﻓﻖ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺹ‪.(126 .‬‬‫‪AR 26‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪B‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪33‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪37‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪47‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪52‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪58‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.B‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )((‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(158 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ" )ﺹ‪(56 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ؛ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪(66 .‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬(‫ )ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬u ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ‬.‫ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬u ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬

2‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬(‫ )ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬u ‫ﺯﺭ‬SCN
(33 .‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺹ‬B(31 .‫ )ﺹ‬Live guide
Change Color Saturation

PeopleNightscapes

MotionScenery

Indoors

Close-ups

ART(47 .‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ )ﺹ‬Z(37 .‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )ﺹ‬Live Composite

ART
1
EffectOff

Pop Artn(58 .‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‬P/A/S/M(75 .‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‬Standard
Recommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
S-AF

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

± 0.0
S-IS On
M-IS

P

NormalsRGB
N

250 F5.6

FHD
60p
1:02:03

1023

AR 30

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(AUTO‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.B‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺱﺗﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪،[Express Motions‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.2‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ّ ،‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﻭ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[Blurred Motion‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ )‪" v .(B‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(56 .‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(SCN‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Nightscapes‬‬‫‪People‬‬‫‪Scenery‬‬‫‪Motion‬‬‫‪Close-ups‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Indoors‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫‪People‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪Portrait B‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪e-Portrait e‬‬‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait +‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Landscape‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait +‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Nightscape‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ‪.(71 .‬‬‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(137 ،133 .‬‬‫‪Children m‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Nightscapes‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪Nightscape G‬‬‫‪Portrait +‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Nightscape‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ‪.(71 .‬‬‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(137 ،133 .‬‬‫‪Handheld‬‬‫‪Starlight H‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Fireworks X‬‬‫‪Light Trails d‬‬‫‪Motion‬‬‫‪AR 34‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(137 ،133 .‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(137 ،133 .‬‬‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗُ َﺠﻤﱢﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺘُﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ )‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(137 ،133 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) M‬ﺹ‪.(55 .‬‬‫‪Sport C‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪Children m‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Panning J‬‬‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻄﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪Landscape F‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫` ‪Sunset‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬‫‪Beach & Snow g‬‬‫ﻧﺎﺻﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬‫‪ Backlight HDR E‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪Candlelight W‬‬‫ﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤ ﱠ‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻳ ْ‬‫ُﺤ َﺘ َﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ َ‬‫‪Silent[♥] k‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫]]♥[‪) "[Silent‬ﺹ‪ ،(42 .‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬‫‪Portrait B‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪e-Portrait e‬‬‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪Children m‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Indoors‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪Scenery‬‬‫‪Panorama s‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ" )ﺹ‪ ،(43 .‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬‫‪ Backlight HDR E‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫‪Close-ups‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪Macro i‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Nature Macro j‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Documents d‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Focus‬‬‫‪Shot t‬‬‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬‫"]‪ :[Focus Bracketing‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪ ،(46 .‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[e-Portrait‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Handheld Starlight‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Backlight HDR‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ]‪ [Handheld Starlight‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪،RAW+JPEG‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﮐﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.JPEG‬‬‫• ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ]‪ [Backlight HDR‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDR‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ I‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Z‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Z‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.AP‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Live Composite‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.G‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.F‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ‪ (50 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.AP‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AP‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AP‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Live Composite‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪Live Time‬‬‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬‫ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫‪ Multiple Exposure‬ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪40‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪41‬‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫‪Panorama‬‬‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﱠﻌﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺿﻌﻒ )‪ (z‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ )‪ (y‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪43‬‬‫‪Keystone‬‬‫‪Compensation‬‬‫ﻳُﺼﺤﺢ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫‪AE Bracketing‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪45‬‬‫‪Focus Bracketing‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪46‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫]‪ :[Live Composite‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "‪) Light Trails‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(" ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SCN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Live Composite‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪ (37 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) OI.Share‬ﺹ‪ (137 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(55 .‬‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫]‪ :[Live Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﯽ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﯽ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2min‬‬‫‪1min 2min 4min‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Live Time‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪.(37 .‬‬‫‪Live Time‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) OI.Share‬ﺹ‪ (137 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(54 .‬‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫]‪ :[Multiple Exposure‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪ (37 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،u‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪) "Image Overlay" v :‬ﺹ‪(117 .‬‬‫‪AR 40‬‬‫]‪ :[HDR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪HDR‬‬‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[HDR2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬‫‪ HDR2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ .HDR1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.200‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR1 HDR2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [HDR‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪.(37 .‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.HDR‬‬‫• ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣُﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ً‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪.HDR‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDR‬ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[sRGB‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]]♥[‪[Silent‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﺮﺣﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]]♥[‪ [Silent‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪ (37 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗُﻈﻠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ‪ LED‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]]♥[‪ ،[Silent‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻛﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬‫ ‪Off :8‬‬‫ ‪Off :AF Illuminator‬‬‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣ ً‬‫ُﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]]♥[‪.[Silent‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(73 .‬‬‫‪AR 42‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ﺃ ِﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺿﻌﻒ* ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺳﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪y‬‬‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ* ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Panorama‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪ (37 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃ ِﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪Save‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ‪/‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻟﻠﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫]‪[Keystone Compensation‬‬‫ﻳُﺼﺤﺢ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Keystone Compensation‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪ (37 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪(2‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ (3‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪:‬‬‫ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﺩﺃ‬‫ ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬‫ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW + JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‪ g‬ﺃﻭ ‪ h‬ﺃﻭ ‪i‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ (j‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟـ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Four Thirds lens‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﻃﻮﻻ ﺑﺆﺭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪.(87 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (I) #‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭ‪ (G) jY‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪) LV‬ﺹ‪ً (75 .‬‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫]‪ :[AE Bracketing‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [AE Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪.(37 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪5f‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ‪ 5‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ )‪ ،(±0.0 EV‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ،−1.3 EV‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ،−0.7 EV‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪،+0.7 EV‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.+1.3 EV‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪5f‬‬‫‪5f‬‬‫‪3f‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪3f‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ‪ 3‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ )‪ ،(±0.0 EV‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ،−1.0 EV‬ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.+1.0 EV‬‬‫‪AE Bracketing‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫]‪ :[Focus Bracketing‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Focus Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AP‬ﺹ‪.(37 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Focus Bracketing‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ) )ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Four Thirds‬ﺍﻷﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) Micro Four Thirds‬ﺍﻷﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬‫‪AR 46‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﻭﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.F‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )‪Soft Focus Effect‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ Pin Hole Effect‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Frame Effect‬ﺃﻭ ‪ White Edge Effect‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ Star Light Effect‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Color Filter‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Monochrome Color‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ Blur Effect‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(Shade Effect‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Frame Effect‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [Color Filter‬ﺹ‪ (91 .‬ﻭ ]‪) [Monochrome Color‬ﺹ‪ (92 .‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ (68 .‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HI‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﺹ‪ (50 .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.GF‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Pop Art I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻛﻜﻞ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Grainy Film I/II‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪Pin Hole I/II/III‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻢ‬‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Diorama I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻐﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺆﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Cross Process I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺸﻰء ‪ Cross Process II‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻜﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Key Line I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗُﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺑًﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Watercolor I/II‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺸﺊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪Vintage I/II/III‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﻨﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺘﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﺤﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Partial Color I/II/III‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Bleach Bypass I/II‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "‪ ،"Bleach bypass‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺍﺭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Instant Film‬‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ II‬ﻭ ‪ III‬ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ﻣُﻌ ﱠﺪﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )‪.(I‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺹ‪ ،(81 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ "ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﻼﺳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Partial Color‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Partial Color I/II/III‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ )ﺹ‪.(48 .‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪Color‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ (68 .‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HI‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪" v .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) "(ISO) ISO‬ﺹ‪(77 .‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪60" F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4000‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‬‫‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫‪F22‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(%‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،ART‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ ،(F) F‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪"s‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ "‪ "s‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ,(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ (68 .‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8‬‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ( ‪‬‬‫‪) ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ(‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪" v .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) "(ISO) ISO‬ﺹ‪(77 .‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪60" F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫ِ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗُﺠﻤﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺗُﻀﻴﻒ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ (68 .‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬‫"‪4000 250 125 60 30 15 60‬‬‫)ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ( ‪‬‬‫‪) ‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ(‬‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪" v .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) "(ISO) ISO‬ﺹ‪(77 .‬‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪2000 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺑﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫‪125 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫ِ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ,(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/4000‬ﻭ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [LIVE TIME‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) [Live View Boost] v .‬ﺹ‪(122 .‬‬‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) [Noise Reduct.] v .‬ﺹ‪(123 .‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪(BULB/LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [LIVE TIME‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء )‪:(BULB‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬‫)‪:(LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ [Live Bulb‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[Live Time‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )]‪ [LIVE TIME‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ]‪ [BULB‬ﻭ ]‪ [LIVE TIME‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) OI.Share‬ﺹ‪.(137 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ّ‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮ ّﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‬‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ]‪ [Composite Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬‫]‪ [LIVECOMP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‪ [Ready for composite shooting‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ َﻭﻣ َ‬‫َﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪) OI.Share‬ﺹ‪.(137 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ّ‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ d‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪d‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )‪(V‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ S‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Y‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪) [Touchscreen Settings] v .‬ﺹ‪(126 .‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪3x‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [R REC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) R‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪(.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؛ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ؛ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Handheld Starlight‬ﺃﻭ ‪Light‬‬‫‪ trails‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Panorama‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Backlight HDR‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SCN‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Keystone Compensation‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ Panorama‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Live Time‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Multiple Exposure‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Z‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪" v .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ" )ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪" v .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" )ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪.(59 .‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.G‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.F‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [R REC‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) R‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬‫ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ n‬ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Recording Volume] v‬ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪28mm‬‬

‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪● REC 00:12‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪Standard n‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫‪4K o‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪.4K‬‬‫―‬‫‪Clips q‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪62‬‬‫‪High-speed p‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪65‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ UHS-I‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ UHS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [4K‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[High-speed‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [Standard‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Clips‬‬‫• ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ .[4K‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ 4K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Standard‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪ (59 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻟﻪ( )ﺹ‪.(82 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪● REC 00:12‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪Art Fade W‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Old Film M‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Echo U‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ِﺗﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ One Shot Echo T‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺷﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Tele-converter‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺯﺭ ‪ً INFO‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ Art fade‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 60‬‬

‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.ART‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫‪‬‬‫‪Movie Tele-converter‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪● REC 00:12‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ M‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ N‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪.Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ‪ Movie Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ )ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ .‬ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬‫)"‪ .("My Clips‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪) My Clips‬ﺹ‪.(106 .‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Clips‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪.(59 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻟﻪ( )ﺹ‪.(82 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ My Clips‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Added to My Clips.‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪00:04 MOV‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ v‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Move a clip within a My Clips folder.‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 62‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪My Clips‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ n‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HIGF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Remove from My Clips.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪" v .‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪"My Clips‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪" v .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪"My Clips‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) My Clips‬ﺹ‪ .(106 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.My Clips‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪My Clips‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪2018.4‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪*My Clips‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ My Clips‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،c‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪See all My‬‬‫‪ [Clips‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫‪Play My Clips‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Export My Clips‬‬‫ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Rearrange Order‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Preset Destination‬‬‫ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.c My Clips‬‬‫‪Remove from My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻌﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪" v .‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪) "My Clips‬ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ]‪ [Export My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ً‬

‫‪Clip Effects‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Transition Effect‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Happy Days‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Volume‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Happy Days‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Sound‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Preview‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Begin Export‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤُﺠﻤّﻊ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ]‪[Happy Days‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ ،[Happy Days‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ً 120‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ]‪.[HD‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [High-speed‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪ (59 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ*‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺹ‪.(66 .‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬

‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪● REC 00:12‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻭﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ" )ﺹ‪ (29 .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ R‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )‪ .(Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬‫)‪ (R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪) "Custom Self-timer" v .‬ﺹ‪.(73 .‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪AR 66‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ‪.(108 .‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [+‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ‪ C‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪(Exposure F‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )"–"( ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ )"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.±5.0 EV‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ )‪(0‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–(‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،ART‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،Z‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HI‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،S‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SCN‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Z‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ±3.0 EV‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪ ،±3.0 EV‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.±3.0 EV‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) [Dial Function] v .G‬ﺹ‪(121 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺳﺘُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،Fn‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪) [b‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ panorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،SCN‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺒﻪ‬‫ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Z‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Standard‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 68‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺹ‪.(70 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(H) N‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) I‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ([ ﺃﻭ ]‪) J‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ([ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪ I‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ J‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.GF‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(H) N‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ([‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) I‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ([ ﺃﻭ ]‪) J‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ([ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺹ‪ (81 .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ‬‫]‪) [Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪.(111 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(H) N‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫‪Face Priority Off N‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬‫‪Face & Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [(Digital ESP metering) p‬ﺹ‪ ،(89 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [MF‬ﺹ‪ .(79 .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(I) #‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪" v .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺹ‪(72 .‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪Fill In‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Redeye‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫‪Flash Off‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Red-Eye Slow‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫ﺗﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Slow‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Slow2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Manual Value 4 ،3‬‬‫‪etc.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[(Redeye) 0‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [(Redeye) 0‬ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪P/A‬‬‫‪S/M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬
‫—‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪Fill In‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Redeye‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫‪Flash Off‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Red-Eye Slow‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Slow‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Slow2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫—‬‫‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪Fill In‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Redeye‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫‪Flash Off‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Slow2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬

‫—‬

‫—‬

‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ #‬ﻭ‪ $‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.B‬‬‫* ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﻲ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪17mm f1.8‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫‪ED 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 EZ‬‬‫‪1‬ﻡ‬‫‪ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6‬‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﻡ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫‪/o‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪Sequential High‬‬‫‪/S‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Sequential Low‬‬‫‪/Y12s‬‬‫‪Y 12 sec Y12s‬‬‫‪/Y2s‬‬‫‪Y 2 sec Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 8.6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4.8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (79 .‬ﻭ]‪) [AEL/AFL‬ﺹ‪.(127 .‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻻ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(G) jY‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [Y Timer‬ﻭ]‪[Number of Frames‬‬‫‪ Custom Self-timer /YC‬ﻭ]‪.[Interval Length‬‬‫‪YC‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،S‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،T‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.G‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ )ﺹ‪.(42 .‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪W Keep Warm Color‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ........................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪77 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ*‪ ........................... 1‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ ................................................ KK‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ ................................................. nK‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ*‪ .......................................... 2‬ﺹ‪33 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ*‪ ..................................3‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SCN‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ART‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.P/A/S/M/n/Z‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 8‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪W Keep Warm Color‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ HI‬ﺃﻭ ‪P‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(165 .‬‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻳﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﯽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ ،LV‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪d‬‬

‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬

‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪8 90 a b‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪77 .‬‬‫‪ K 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪87 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ .......................................... KK 8‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪89 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ ........................................... nK a‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪88 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ‪ ......................................... 1* S‬ﺹ‪89 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ ....................................... 1*u‬ﺹ‪90 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ‪ ....................................... 1*t‬ﺹ‪90 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪ ...................................... 1*z‬ﺹ‪91 .‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ............................... 1* F‬ﺹ‪91 .‬‬‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪ .................................. 1* T‬ﺹ‪92 .‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ ......................................... 1* E‬ﺹ‪92 .‬‬‫‪ ................................... 2*1* Color‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ ...........................3*1* Color/Vivid‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ ...‬ﺹ‪94 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪95 .‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ" ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Partial Color‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪.Color Creator‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪.LV‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ‬‫]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(165 .‬‬‫‪75 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪(Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(92–89 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪.Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪J K‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪i-Enhance A‬‬‫‪Vivid B‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Natural C‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Muted D‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait E‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Monochrome‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪*Color Creator‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪l‬‬‫‪Cross Process‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Key Line‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪Watercolor‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪Vintage‬‬‫‪r‬‬‫‪*Partial Color‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Bleach Bypass‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪Instant Film‬‬‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ ‪.Color Creator‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .Art Filter‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Color Creator‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ ،HI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Partial Color‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ‪.(49 .‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﻲ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ — ISO 200‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ — ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ً ISO‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Recommend‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪AUTO LOW 200 250 320 400 500‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [ISO-Auto Set‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(123 .‬‬‫‪25600–200 ،LOW‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫‪.GF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪) WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ((‬‫ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪W Keep Warm Color‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪AUTO‬‬‫—‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰء ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪ [On‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[W Keep Warm Color‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(124 .‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪5300 K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500 K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000 K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻠﺒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000 K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬‫>‬‫‪4000 K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500 K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪/P‬‬‫‪/Q‬‬‫‪/W‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪ 14000 K – 2000 K‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ‪" v .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ" )ﺹ‪(79 .‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Q‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [W‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻇﻼﻻ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )‪(AF Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪.AF Mode‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪S-AF C-AF MF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫)‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫‪S-AF+MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪ S-AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ؛ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ً‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .Four Thirds‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [MF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [C-AF+TR‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ n‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) "AEL/AFL" v .G‬ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬‫‪AR 80‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪.Image Aspect‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪4:3 16:9 3:2 1:1 3:4‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪4608x3456‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Image aspect‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(KK ،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫‪.(KK‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪4608x3456‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪+RAW‬‬‫‪L F LN MN SN‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ YF) JPEG‬ﻭ‪ YN‬ﻭ‪ XN‬ﻭ‪ (WN‬ﻭ‪ .RAW‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (W‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪SF‬‬‫ﻭ‪ F‬ﻭ‪ N‬ﻭ‪.(B‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ YF‬ﻭ‪ YN‬ﻭ‪ XN‬ﻭ‪ ،WN‬ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [K Set‬ﺹ‪ (124 .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪.Custom Menu‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORF‬ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪JPEG‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪) "(Edit‬ﺹ‪(115 .‬‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪(nK ،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬‫‪.(nK‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Fine 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪ (59 .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ]‪ [Video Frame Rate‬ﻭ‬‫]‪ [Video Bit Rate‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺹ‪.(114 .‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﱠ‬‫ﻭﺇﻻ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧ َﺘﺮ ﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ NTSC‬ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PAL‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،NTSC‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪(30p) 60p‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PAL‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪(25p) 50p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Standard‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‬‫ﺧﻼﻑ ‪:n‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪1920×1080 Super Fine 60p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Super Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Super Fine 30p‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1920×1080 Fine 60p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 60p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 30p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Normal 30p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Super Fine 50p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Super Fine 25p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Super Fine 25p‬‬‫‪AR 82‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪1920×1080 : FHD‬‬‫‪1280×720 :‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬‫‪(Normal) N ،(Fine) F ،(Super Fine) SF‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪24p ،(50p) 25p ،(60p) 30p‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪1920×1080 Fine 50p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Fine 25p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Fine 25p‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1920×1080 Normal 50p‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 25p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Normal 25p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Super Fine 24p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Super Fine 24p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Fine 24p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Fine 24p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 24p‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪1920×1080 : FHD‬‬‫‪1280×720 :‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬‫‪(Normal) N ،(Fine) F ،(Super Fine) SF‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪24p ،(50p) 25p ،(60p) 30p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Normal 24p‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [4K‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ *‪:1‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪3840×2160 30p‬‬‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3840×2160 25p‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪3840×2160 24p‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪3840×2160 :‬‬‫‪4K‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪24p ،25p ،30p‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Clips‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ *‪:1‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 60p‬‬‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1920×1080 Normal 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪1280×720 Normal 30p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 50p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 25p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Normal 25p‬‬‫‪1920×1080 Normal 24p‬‬‫‪1280×720 Normal 24p‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪1920×1080 : FHD‬‬‫‪1280×720 :‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬‫‪(Normal) N‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪24p ،(50p) 25p ،(60p) 30p‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [High-speed‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ *‪:2‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪1280×720 HighSpeed 120fps‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪1280×720 :‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪120fps‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻫﻮ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/24 s‬ﻭ‪.1/4000 s‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ، (F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ l‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/24 s‬ﻭ‪.1/4000 s‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻭ‪.6400‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪) [Dial Function] v .G‬ﺹ‪(121 .‬‬‫‪85 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[x‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 86‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)‪(M-IS‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫)‪(S-IS‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪K Image‬‬‫‪Stabilizer‬‬‫‪S-IS Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪KImage Stabilizer‬‬‫‪n Image‬‬‫‪Stabilizer‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )‪ (VCM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )‪ (VCM‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] ‪ [M-IS‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M-IS Off]/[S-IS Off‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.1‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭ‪ 1000.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ (basic) [Reset‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻦ ﻳُﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪87 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪" v .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪) WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(("‬‫)ﺹ‪(78 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Auto x‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪) A‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ – ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ّ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ‪) G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ – ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ّ‬‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ (basic) [Reset‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻦ ﻳُﻌﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Metering‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪H‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ .([IFace Priority‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪IHI‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬‫‪ ISH‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ(‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪(Sharpness‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(76 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Sharpness‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ )‪(Contrast‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(76 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Contrast‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Contrast‬‬‫‪Contrast‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Saturation‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(76 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Saturation‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Saturation‬‬‫‪Saturation‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Gradation‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(76 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Gradation‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Gradation‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪Shadow Adj‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Gradation Normal‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Gradation‬‬‫‪ Gradation High Key‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Gradation Low Key‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Color Filter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(76 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Color Filter‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Color Filter‬‬‫‪Monochrome‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪T N‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪F N‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪Color Filter‬‬‫‪N:None‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪91 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Monochrome Color‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ ،(76 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Monochrome Color‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Monochrome‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪T N‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪Monochrome Color‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪F N‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪Monochrome Color‬‬‫‪N:Normal‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪(Effect) i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ i-Enhance‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(76 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Effect‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫‪AR 92‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪(Effect: Low) r‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ i-Enhance‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪(Effect: Standard) s‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ i-Enhance‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ "ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ" ﻭ"ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪(Effect: High) t‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ i-Enhance‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Color Space‬ﺹ‪ (124 .‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Custom Menu‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Color Space‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(IEC‬‬‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AdobeRGB‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪.Adobe Systems‬‬‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) ART‬ﺹ‪ (47 .‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺹ‪ (59 .‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Backlight HDR‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) SCN‬ﺹ‪ (35 .‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDR‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Z‬ﺹ‪.(41 .‬‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ )‪(Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Highlight&Shadow Control‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Highlight&Shadow Control‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shadow-5‬‬‫‪RESET‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫‪Midtone‬‬‫‪Midtone+2‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪RESET‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫‪Highlight‬‬‫‪HighLight+5‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(3‬‬‫‪RESET‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫‪Shadow‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪(Button Function‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪F Function‬‬‫‪(Digital Tele-converter) b‬‬‫‪R Function‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Button Function‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻭ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﻋﺒﺮ ]‪) [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪.(122 .‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ]‪ [Button Function‬ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Button Function‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(121 ،109 .‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪S ±0‬‬‫‪A±0‬‬‫‪G±0‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪± 0.0‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪M-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪95 AR‬‬‫‪(AEL/AFL) t‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ .AF‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪) [AEL/AFL‬ﺹ‪ .(127 .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،AEL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) k‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(79 .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪(AF Area Select) N‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(69 .‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ .[MF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪) F‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ ART‬ﻭﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،Z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ (68 .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(50 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪.G‬‬‫‪) [Dial Function] v‬ﺹ‪(121 .‬‬‫‪(Digital Tele-converter) b‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [On‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪ [Off‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(111 .‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ )ﺹ‪.(127 .‬‬‫‪(Switch G Lock) G‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ t‬ﻟﻪ )ﺹ‪ .(95 .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ t‬ﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.u‬‬‫‪) "AEL/AFL" v‬ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ t‬ﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AE‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪(Super Spot AF‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [a‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ‪Q /‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺧﺼﺺ ]‪ [a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [a‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻘﻌﻲ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪ [a‬ﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﺃﻭ ‪) R‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪(14× ،10× ،7× ،5× ،3×) .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HIGF‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪5 6 7 89‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪×10‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪100-0015‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪d c b‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪ij‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪×10‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪q‬‬

‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪P 250‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪100-0015‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪tsr‬‬‫‪AR 98‬‬

‫‪u‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪139–132 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ........................GPS‬ﺹ‪137 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ..........................Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪126 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪145 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪104 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪116 ،105 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪103 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪104 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪125 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪ b‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ............................... HDR‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪58–27 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪53–50 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪53–50 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪88 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪111 ،76 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪131 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪131 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪77 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪89 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪P 250‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪) [q Info] v‬ﺹ‪(128 .‬‬‫‪99 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.q‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫زر ‪q‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/t‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )‪(HIGF‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪ /(I‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪ /(H‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬‫‪ 10‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪ /(G‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪(F‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪ (H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪(G) u‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪(a) Fn‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪(h) R‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ )ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪Q‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ(‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪My Clips‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪My Clips‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪G‬‬
‫‪11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪2018.4‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫*‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،My Clips‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪.(62 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪) [G Settings] v .‬ﺹ‪(129 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ×‪2‬‬‫‪14x‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ×‪14‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪101 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [L‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫<‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Start‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﻋﻴّﻦ ]‪ [Happy Days‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Slide Interval‬‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ 10‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬‫‪ Movie Interval‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ]‪[Happy Days‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ ،[Happy Days‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫‪AR 102‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Play Movie‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.H/I‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ F‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫‪Movie Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ‪ Q‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Play from Beginning‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‬‫]‪:[Play Movie‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ‬‫]‪:[Delete entire n‬‬‫]‪:[Erase‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،Q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪F‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪Share Order ،Erase Selected ،0‬‬‫‪) "(Selected‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻣﺰ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪‬‬‫‪103 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Share Order‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Share‬‬‫‪ [Order‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪ .h‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪.G‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Share Order‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ .(R) h‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﺭ ‪(R) h‬‬‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪ ،[h‬ﺧﺼﺼﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [h‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ً‬‫]‪ [qR Function‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪.(121 .‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Reset share Order‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ q‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪(Share Order Selected ،Erase Selected ،0‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [0‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Erase Selected‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Share Order Selected‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [H‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [qR Function‬ﺹ‪.(121 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (R) h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺹ‪ (101 .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ v‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (R) h‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [0‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫]‪ [Erase Selected‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ‪.(108 .‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Add to My Clips‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.H‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ً‬‫]‪ [Play ‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .MENU‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.c‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪[Play My Clips‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪105 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Add to My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Q‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،HIGF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ My Clips‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪My Clips‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ q‬ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.c‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪[See all My Clips‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0020‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫‪.HIGF‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪Remove from My‬‬‫‪ [Clips‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪My Clips‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪My‬‬‫‪."Clips‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ّ‬‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻌﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.(a) Fn‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1x‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (a) Fn‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ×2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ×14‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (G) u‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،×2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ .HI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭ‪.P‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ 8‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ 6‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .P‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬‫ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪[G Settings] v .‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(122 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ R‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪107 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﺃﻭ‬‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪H‬‬

‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪" v .‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ )‪"(Share Order‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬‫‪‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ h‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ 7‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ‪.(66 .‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﻄﻼ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪AR 108‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬

‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ ،LV‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ‪(110 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪(121 .‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺹ‪(119 .‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬‫‪ q‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ )ﺹ‪(115 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.B‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.G Custom Menu‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪A. AF/MF‬‬‫‪S1/C2/M1‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪1 A‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪B‬‬‫‪Face Priority‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪C1‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪C2‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Lens‬‬‫‪D1‬‬‫‪D2‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫‪109 AR‬‬.‫ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬Q ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬GF ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ً‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬KImage Stabilizer
22 AF Illuminator
KElec. Zoom Speed
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse#RC ModeBack

3

Shooting Menu 2

Shooting Menu 2
1‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬S-IS On
Off OnOn
Normal
±0.0
Off
Off

KImage Stabilizer
22 AF Illuminator
KElec. Zoom Speed
1

Q

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse#RC Mode

S-IS On
On
Normal
±0.0
Off
Off

Back

Set

Set

.‫ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬Q ‫ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬GF ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬.‫ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬MENU ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬4.(165 .‫ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‬،‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬Shooting Menu 2/Shooting Menu 1 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬Shooting Menu 1
11
2

Reset
Picture Mode
Digital Tele-converter
Metering

Back

p

Set

Shooting Menu 2(87 .‫ )ﺹ‬K Image Stabilizer(111 .‫ )ﺹ‬AF Illuminator(112 .‫ )ﺹ‬K Elec. Zoom Speed(86 .‫ )ﺹ‬x
(112 .‫ )ﺹ‬Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse(113 .‫ )ﺹ‬#RC ModeOff4(‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬$X

Shooting Menu 1
Reset(111 ،76 .‫ )ﺹ‬Picture Mode(111 .‫ )ﺹ‬Digital Tele-converter(89 .‫ )ﺹ‬Metering

W(Reset) ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬.‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬.Q ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬W Shooting Menu 1 ‫[ ﻓﻲ‬Reset] ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬.Q ‫[( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬Basic] ‫[ ﺃﻭ‬Full]) ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬.Q ‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﺣﺪﺩ‬،‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬(165 .‫ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‬v

.Q ‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬Yes] ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬

1
2
3

AR 110‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪(Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[Picture Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(76 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺖ‬‫ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،SCN‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Z‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Standard‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W Shooting Menu 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ )‪(AF Illuminator‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﮐﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ )‪(KElec. Zoom Speed‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [KElec. Zoom Speed‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X Shooting Menu 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬ﻓﻲ ‪X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﯽ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪S-IS On‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪KImage Stabilizer‬‬‫‪AF Illuminator‬‬‫‪KElec. Zoom Speed‬‬‫‪Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse‬‬‫‪#RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Number of Frames‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Start Waiting Time‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Length‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Movie Resolution‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Frame Rate‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳُﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪AR 112‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [On]/[Off‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ]‪ [On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )‪(#RC Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ" )ﺹ‪(151 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ]‪) [Rec View‬ﺹ‪ (119 .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ 31‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ (79 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[C-AF+TR‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ q‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ؛ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬؛ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ٍ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [4K‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Movie Resolution] < [Movie Settings‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Video Menu‬‬‫‪Video Menu‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪Fine‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫‪Recording Volume‬‬‫‪nAF Mode‬‬‫‪nImage Stabilizer‬‬‫‪nElec. Zoom Speed‬‬‫‪Video Frame Rate‬‬‫‪Video Bit Rate‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳُﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳُﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On e‬ﻳُﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ؛ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫‪57‬‬‫‪Recording Volume‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫―‬‫‪nAF Mode‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ AF Mode‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫‪nImage Stabilizer‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪87‬‬‫‪nElec. Zoom Speed‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫―‬‫‪Video Frame Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧ َﺘﺮ ﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﱠ‬‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ NTSC‬ﻭﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PAL‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،NTSC‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪(30p) 60p‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PAL‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪(25p) 50p‬‬‫‪82‬‬‫‪Video Bit Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[MF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(Diorama) k‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Movie R‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.O‬‬‫‪AR 114‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪82‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬‫‪) y‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪R‬‬
‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪) Print Order‬ﺹ‪(145 .‬‬‫‪) Reset Protect‬ﺹ‪(118 .‬‬‫‪) Reset share Order‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪) Device Connection‬ﺹ‪(133 .‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Reset share Order‬‬‫‪Device Connection‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﺘﻔﺔ )‪(R‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪(Edit‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪ .JPEG‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﻭ‬‫]‪ .[JPEG Edit‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪(Playback menu‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Current‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪115 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow Adj‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣُﻀﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Redeye Fix‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[3:4‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1280 × 960‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 640 × 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .320 × 240‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [P‬ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ( ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ‪.(105 .‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫]‪(.[YN+RAW‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫‪RAW‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0 – 0.1‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪(In-Movie Image Capture‬‬‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ 4K‬ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Movie Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [In-Movie Image Capture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(Movie Trimming‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Movie Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Movie Trimming‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Overwrite‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [New File‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Overwrite‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 10‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AR 118‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪’--.--.-- --:--:-‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪s‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5 sec‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪120‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫‪120‬‬‫‪) s‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪k‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪s‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪+1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫—‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪[Natural‬‬‫ﻭ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[20sec] – [0.3sec‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi/Bluetooth‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫‪ Wi-Fi/Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﺴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪،134‬‬‫‪،138‬‬‫‪139‬‬‫—‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(148 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻣﻦ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Format‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻣﻦ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [All Erase‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ )‪(W‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪AR 120‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [W‬ﻣﻦ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ‬‬‫\‪ýHVN‬‬‫‪Hrvatski‬‬‫‪Nederlands‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪Dansk‬‬‫‪Français‬‬‫‪Suomi‬‬‫‪Eesti‬‬‫‪0DJ\DU‬‬‫‪ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ‬‬‫‪Deutsch‬‬‫‪Italiano‬‬‫‪Indonesia‬‬‫‪/LHWXYLǐN‬‬‫‪Latviski‬‬‫)‪Português(Pt‬‬‫‪Polski‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Norsk‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.G Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪Button/Dial‬‬‫‪A. AF/MF‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪B‬‬‫‪Face Priority‬‬‫‪C1‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪C2‬‬‫‪D1 Reset Lens‬‬‫‪D2‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AF/MF a‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪127‬‬‫‪IFace Priority‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪127‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Button/Dial M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪) Disp/8/PC O/N‬ﺹ‪(122 .‬‬‫‪) Exp/ISO/BULB Q/P‬ﺹ‪(123 .‬‬‫‪) # Custom‬ﺹ‪(124 .‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪) K/WB/Color‬ﺹ‪(124 .‬‬‫‪) Record‬ﺹ‪(125 .‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪) K Utility‬ﺹ‪(126 .‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪S1/C2/M1‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪1 A‬‬

‫‪M‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Button Function‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪95‬‬‫‪qR Function‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[H‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[h‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫]>[‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ً‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .1‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪،103‬‬‫‪،104‬‬‫‪145‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪% / F :[P‬‬‫]‪F / FNo. :[A‬‬‫]‪F / Shutter :[S‬‬‫]‪FNo. / Shutter :[M‬‬‫—‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC N‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪.LV‬‬‫‪75 ،74‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭ"‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪،128‬‬‫‪129‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺠﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺠﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛‬‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Flicker reduction‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[Auto‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [50Hz‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [60Hz‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [X] ،[y] ،[1] ،[x] ،[w‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Peaking Color‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪127‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC O‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪AR 122‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪O‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[Output Size‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪130‬‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Exposure Shift‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء )ﺹ‪.(68 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻟـ ‪.ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Noise Filter‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﺘﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪53‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Exp/ISO/BULB Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪*Bulb/Time Timer‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪*Live Time‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪Live Bulb‬‬‫‪Composite‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪Exp/ISO/BULB P‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪54‬‬‫‪55‬‬‫ﱠ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬‫* ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﱠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪123 AR‬‬‫‪# Custom b‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪131‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪131‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪86 ،68‬‬‫‪#+WB‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪K/WB/Color W‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪K Set‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪W‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫)]‪ ([K4] – [K1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪K Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪4608x3456‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪،81‬‬‫‪131‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪88 ،78‬‬‫—‬‫‪93‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫ﻣﻦ ‪ .0001‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫—‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪Pmdd0000.jpg :sRGB‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫‪_mdd0000.jpg :Adobe RGB‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫—‬

‫‪ (1‬ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [AdobeRGB‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ (3‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 63‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Info.‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ‬‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪Record X‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪ (1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Q‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫‪ ،2‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬‫‪05/63‬‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫—‬‫‪Delete‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Cancel‬‬‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﻋﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[Copyright Settings‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬‫‪K Utility c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 126‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪157‬‬‫‪Level Adjust‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫‪Touchscreen‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪*Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫—‬‫‪Certification‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬

‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ .[Eye-Fi‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ AEL/AFL‬ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode4‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫]‪[MF Assist‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ .MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﺮ ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" )ﺹ‪(69 .‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Peaking Color] v‬ﺹ‪(122 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Peaking‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﻤﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Peaking‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫‪127 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫]‪[G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪) q Info‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [q Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪q Info‬‬‫‪Image Only‬‬‫‪Overall‬‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 128‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫• ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫‪) LV-Info‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[LV-Info‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Custom1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Custom2‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Custom1‬‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow‬‬‫‪Level Gauge‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) G Settings‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ .[G Settings‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪G Settings‬‬‫‪A4‬‬‫‪B9‬‬‫‪C 25‬‬‫‪C 100‬‬‫‪My Clips‬‬‫‪Calendar‬‬
‫‪H‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪20‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 25‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪2018.4‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬
‫‪My Clips‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪*My Clips‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،My Clips‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ )ﺹ‪.(62 .‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪129 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫]‪[HDMI‬‬‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ّ .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪(.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪4K‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪.4K HDMI‬‬‫‪1080p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.1080p HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪.480p/576p HDMI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[4K‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪.[1080p‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .HDMI‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [On‬ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ .[HDMI Control‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ"‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ"‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 130‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫]‪[# Slow Limit]/[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪*[# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪*[# X-Sync.‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬‫‪4‬‬‫*‪ 1/200 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﻤﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫]‪[K Set‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)‪(Super Fine‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫)‪(Fine‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫)‪(Normal‬‬‫‪B‬‬‫)‪(Basic‬‬‫‪)Y‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫‪3456×4608‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪)X‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪)W‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫‪960×1280‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫‪131 AR‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻋﻚ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫®‬‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﱠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪(OI.Share) OLYMPUS Image Share ،‬‬‫• ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬‫‪http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪(OI.Palette) Olympus Image Palette ،‬‬‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬‫‪http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oipalette/‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪(OI.Track) OLYMPUS Image Track ،‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬‫‪http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(175 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻛﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬‫‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ "‪."LOCK‬‬‫‪AR 132‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OI.Share App‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Device Connection‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi/Bluetooth‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪QR‬‬‫‪Bluetooth Name‬‬‫‪: xxxxxxxxxxx‬‬‫‪Bluetooth Passcode : 000000‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi SSID‬‬‫‪: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Password‬‬‫‪: 00000000‬‬‫‪Disconnect‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬‫ﻣُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.OI Share‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ .QR‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣ ً‬‫ُﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،QR‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻲ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ ‪:Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪3/3‬‬‫‪Connection Setup‬‬‫‪Scan the QR code, using‬‬‫‪the Olympus Image Share‬‬‫‪app.‬‬‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪ [Disconnect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫‪133 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ e‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Power-off Standby‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻳﺴﺄﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪"Select‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [Select‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Power-off Standby‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻘﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬‬‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺹ‪(133 .‬‬‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬‫‪Power-off Standby‬‬‫‪Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off‬‬‫‪Standby so images can be imported‬‬‫?‪while power is off‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Power-off Standby:On‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫‪Confirm whether or not to activate‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ ،(133 .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬‫‪Power-off Standby every time power‬‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫‪is turned off? This setting can be‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫‪changed from the menu anytime.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Don’t show this screen again‬‬‫‪Confirm every time‬‬‫‪Don't show this screen again‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 134‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗُﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻂ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .ON/OFF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Power-off Standby‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪135 AR‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪" v .‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ )‪) "(Share Order‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [Device Connection‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS ON‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷ ﱢﻐﻞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪.Image Transfer‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Save‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ]‪ [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) e‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﱠﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬‫ ]‪[On] :[Availability‬‬‫‪[On] :[Power-off standby] -‬‬‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ )ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Power-off Standby‬ﺹ‪(134 .‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،iOS‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﱠ ً‬‫ﺼﻼ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﱠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ( ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﱠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬‫ﻳﻘﻈﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 136‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [Device Connection‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Remote‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ‬‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪ OI.Track‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪.GPS‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ‪.OI.Track‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ G‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﻤﱢﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.OI.Track‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺳﺠ ْﻞ ﱡ‬‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺳﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ OI.Track‬ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ِ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ .GPS‬ﻻ ﺗﻨ ِﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.OI.Track‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Device Connection‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.q‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪ GPS‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ OI.Track‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ g‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪137 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫‪Availability‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪Connection Password‬‬‫― )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴًﺎ( *‬‫‪Power-off Standby‬‬‫‪* Select‬‬‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻣﻌﻄﻞ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪:Wi-Fi/Bluetooth‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Connection Password‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪" v .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(133 .‬‬‫‪AR 138‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ e Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Availability‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻓﻲ‬‫]‪" v .[Power-off Standby] < [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" )ﺹ‪(134 .‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪139 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (122 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪:USB‬‬‫‪:Windows‬‬‫‪:Mac‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7 SP1‬‬‫‪macOS v10.12/OS X v10.8–v10.11‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] ‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 140‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) Windows Photo Gallery‬ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (122 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪OLYMPUS Digital Camera Updater‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .OLYMPUS Digital Camera Updater‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻪ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪http://oup.olympus-imaging.com/ou1download/index/‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ،OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/ov3download/‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪141 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (122 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [One Moment‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪AR 142‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫‪Pics/Sheet‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ )ﺣﺠﺰ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪2018.04.01 12:30:00‬‬‫‪Printf‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ‬‫]‪ [Single PrintC‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪Single PrintC‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪ ،[Single PrintC‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪MoreE‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[All Print‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Option Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫×<‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪HIGF‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Continue‬‬‫‪143 AR‬‬‫‪‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 144‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [<ALL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﺤﺠﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [<ALL‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫<‬‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]< )‪.[(Print Order‬‬‫‪145 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 146‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]< )‪.[(Print Order‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Q‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺮﻙ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ "ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ" )ﺹ‪ (174 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪147 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫)‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ً‬‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ SD :‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪SDXC‬‬‫ﻭ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "LOCK‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 148‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪) "(Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(120 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪) [Eye-Fi] v .‬ﺹ‪(126 .‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫‪ 17.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪426‬‬‫‪ 10.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪663‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪ 7.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪972‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪ 3.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪1891‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪ 2.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪2741‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪ 5.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪1348‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪ 3.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪1951‬‬‫‪ 1.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪3696‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪ 1.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪5191‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪ 1.0‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪6777‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪9036‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪14352‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪17428‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪3456×4608‬‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪960×1280‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ*‬‫* ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪149 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .OM‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 150‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .Super FP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-900R‬‬‫‪،MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪،MULTI ،FP MANUAL ،FP TTL AUTO‬‬‫‪SL MANUAL ،SL AUTO ،RC‬‬‫‪ 200) GN58‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪(1‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪،MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪FP MANUAL ،FP TTL AUTO‬‬‫‪ 85) GN36‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪ 24) GN20 (1‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪(1‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪(1‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN14‬ﻣﻠﻢ*‪(1‬‬‫‪STF-8‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪GN8.5‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪) X Shooting Menu 2‬ﺹ‪.(110 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .RC‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪ LV‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫‪151 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪.Super FP‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LO‬‬‫‪Low‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪1:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪Manual‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺪﻝ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 152‬‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪30°‬‬‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬‫‪7m‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‬‫‪50°‬‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫ﻋﻦ ‪ٍ 4‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪5m‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺘﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/160‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.RC‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪153 AR‬‬‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻒ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/ USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫*‪3‬‬‫‪/SDHC/SD‬‬‫‪Eye-Fi/SDXC‬‬‫)‪OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share‬‬‫)‪Olympus Image Palette (OI.Palette‬‬‫)‪OLYMPUS Image Track (OI.Track‬‬‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪E-PL9‬‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 154‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

7

2

STF-8

FL-600R

FL-300R

FL-900R

FL-14‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬*‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬

FCON-P01‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬WCON-P01‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬MCON-P01‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬MCON-P02‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬MC-14
Teleconverter

M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 17mm f1.2 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 25mm f1.2 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 45mm f1.2 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 30mm f3.5 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 7-14mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-100mm f4.0 IS PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 300mm f4.0 IS PRO

1*Four Thirds ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬OM ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬MMF-3/MMF-2

Four Thirds ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬

1*

MF-2

2 OM ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬BCL-0980/BCL-1580‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ‬155 AR‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎءﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ً .‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 156‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Custom Menu c‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Pixel Mapping‬ﺹ‪.(126 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪157 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐـﺔ‬‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫• ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ" )ﺹ‪.(21 .‬‬‫‪Please select your language.‬‬‫‪Veuillez choisir votre langue.‬‬‫‪Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.‬‬‫‪Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Sleep] v‬ﺹ‪(126 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ #‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 158‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻀﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺹ‪ ،(81 .‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪ ،(69 .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟـ ]‪) [Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪.(111 .‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪) [Noise Reduct.] v‬ﺹ‪(123 .‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ" )ﺹ‪(21 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪159 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،n‬ﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﱠﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪(150 .‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ - Pixel Mapping" v .‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(157 .‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ‪ /(57 .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SCN‬ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺹ‪ (35 .‬ﻭ"ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" )ﺹ‪ (35 .‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ"‬‫)ﺹ‪/(36 .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪" Z‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" )ﺹ‪ (42 .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺹ‪ (43 .‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ" )ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪:‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ‪ /(57 .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SCN‬ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺹ‪ (35 .‬ﻭ"ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" )ﺹ‪ (35 .‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ"‬‫)ﺹ‪/(36 .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪" Z‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ" )ﺹ‪ (42 .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺹ‪ (43 .‬ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ" )ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪(MF‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻟﻖ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 160‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [G Settings] < [G/Info Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ N‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺹ‪.(129 .‬‬‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺹ‪.(109 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪) [qR Function]/(121 .‬ﺹ‪) [Dial Function]/(121 .‬ﺹ‪(121 .‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧ َﺘﺮ ﻣﻌ ﱠﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪Video Frame] v .‬‬‫‪) [Rate‬ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪161 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(148 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Q‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Yes][Format‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ The Image Cannot‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Be Edited‬‬‫‪AR 162‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ‪.(22 .‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Internal camera‬‬‫‪temperature is too‬‬‫‪high.‬‬‫‪Please wait for‬‬‫‪cooling before‬‬‫‪camera use.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Settings Changed‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫‪163 AR‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 164‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫‪The lens is locked.‬‬‫‪Please extend the‬‬‫‪lens.‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Please check the‬‬‫‪status of a lens.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪This function‬‬‫‪requires a‬‬‫‪compatible lens.‬‬‫‪Please attach a‬‬‫‪compatible lens.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬.[Reset] ‫[ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬:2*

LV ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬/‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬/‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
v
77
73

8

2*

1*







‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬AUTO
o‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬o‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬#S-AF‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬n‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ISO‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬/‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬

69





71





79





114
81
81









C-AF
4:3
YN

KK

82





1920×1080 Fine 60p(Standard) nK

83

―

―

3840×2160 30p(4K) nK84

(Clips) nK

84

―

―

1920×1080 Normal 60p 4s
1280×720 HighSpeed
120fps(High-speed) nK

85

―



P

(‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬K‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬K Shooting Menuv
110
111 ،76
111
89

2*
―




1*
―




87
111
112



―

86
112
113





‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Basic
C Natural
Off
p

Reset
Picture Mode
Digital Tele-converter
MeteringWS-IS On
On
NormalKImage Stabilizer
AF Illuminator

X





±0.0
Off
Off

KElec. Zoom Speedx
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse#RC Moden Video Menu

165 AR

2*

1*


―










M-IS

nImage Stabilizer

114―
114 ،82 ―114 ،82 ―Normal30p
FinenElec. Zoom Speed
Video Frame Rate
Video Bit Rate

v
114
114
114
87

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
On
±0
C-AF

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Movie R
Recording Volume
nAF Modenq Playback Menu
v

102

115
115
116
،117
118
،105
116
117
145
118
104
133

2*
―


―
―


1*
―






‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬―Happy Days
All
3 sec
Short
On
―
―

―

―

―
―
―
―

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬

Start
BGM
Slide
Slide IntervalMovie IntervalqyR
RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
Movie Edit Sel. Image

―

Edit

R

―
―
―
―
―

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

―
―
―
―
―

Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Device Connection

G Custom Menu
2*1*‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
AF/MF





mode1
mode2
mode1

121 ،70 ―
―
،121
127
―
121







K
Off
Off
On

MagnifyPeaking―b

F Function

―



R REC

R Function

―



h



F
FNo.
Shutter
Shutter،121
127

121 ،95
121
121

―

S-AF
C-AF
MF

AEL/AFLaG‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬v

8

IFace Priority
MF Assist
Reset Lens
Button/Dial
Button M
FunctionqR Function
P
AS
M

Dial Function

AR 166v

122 ،75

،122
128

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

―



LV-C

―



LV-C

B
P/A/S/M

―



LV-C

ART

―







LV-C
Overall ،Image Only

Z/SCN
LV-Info‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Disp/8/PC
N
KControlSettings

q InfoG/InfoSettings

―



―

122


―
―












،(u) Custom1(Level Gauge) Custom2
Calendar ،My Clips ،25
Off
Auto
Off
Red
On
1080p
Off
Auto

123

―



±0

USB Mode
Exp/ISO/BULBp
P
J Exposure Shift






―
―
―










6400
200
Standard
Auto
8min
Off
0.5 sec
1 sec

5High Limit
ISO-Auto Set
Default
Noise Filter
Noise Reduct.
Bulb/Time Timer Q
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings

122
122
122
122
122
،122
130


―
―
―

8
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬123
123
123 ،53
123 ،54123 ،54123 ،54123 ،55

G Settings
Live View Boost
Flicker reduction
Displayed Grid
Peaking Color
8 O
Output Size
HDMI Control

HDMI# Custom
،124
131
،124
131
،86 ،68
124
124

167 AR# X-Sync. b





1/250





1/60

# Slow Limit





Off

w+F

―



W

#+WB

G

v
،124
131
124 ،78124
124 ،932*

1*‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬K/WB/ColorW
K Set

،K2 YN ،K1 YF
K4 WN ،K3 XN
Auto
On
sRGB













―
―
―
―
―




―
―

―

―

―

―
―

―
―





―

―

―

v
120
22
،119
120
119
119
139

2*
―
―

1*
―
―

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
―
―

―

―

English

W

―
―
―





Natural ،k ±0 ،j ±0s
Rec View

138

―

―

―

134
138
119

―
―
―


―
―

―
―

125
125
125

،126
157
126
126
126 ،20
126
126

―
―
―

G

WB

W Keep Warm Color
Color Space
RecordReset
File Name X
Edit Filename
Off
Copyright Info.
Copyright
Artist Name
Settings
Copyright Name
K Utility
Pixel Mapping c
On
1 min
On

Level Adjust
Touchscreen Settings
Sleep
Eye-Fi
Certification

8‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Card SetupX

0.5 sec
On

Selecte‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬e Setup Menu‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬Availability
Connection
Password Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings
Power-off Standby
Reset Settings
Firmware

AR 168‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds Standard‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ Live MOS‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 4/3‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫‪ 17.20‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪ 16.05‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ LCD ،‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ 3.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫‪ 1.04‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(3:2‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪ 60 - 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪ 121‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪) 20 - –2 EV‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪(ISO100 ،f/2.8‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ :P/AUTO :B‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪/‬‬‫‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :S/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬‬‫‪ :n/Manual :M‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ :ART/‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ :SCN/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ :Z/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪) 25600 - 200 ،LOW‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(1/3 EV‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪) ±5.0 EV‬ﺑﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪(1/3 EV‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ 6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬‫‪169 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫‪ SDHC، SDXC ،SD‬ﻭ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،(DCF2.0) JPEG ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬‫‪ ،Exif 2.3‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭ‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Wave‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ 48 PCM ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪My Clips/‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8.6‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(T‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 5 :‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫‪• ISO100) 5.4‬ﻡ(‪• ISO200) 7.6/‬ﻡ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 28‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪MANUAL/(TTL‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬‫‪Bluetooth‬‬‫®‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪4.0 Bluetooth‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 117.1‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 68.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 39.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 380‬ﺟﻢ )ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫‪ 40 - 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ 60 - –20 /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫‪) 90% - 30%‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) 90% - 10%/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪HDMI High-Definition Multimedia‬‬‫‪ Interface‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 170‬‬‫‪‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‬‫‪ 7.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1210‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 35.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 12.8‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 46‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 8.35‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 400 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒَﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫‪ 62‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 38‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 83‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬‫‪ 70‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫‪171 AR‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 172‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ — ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ — ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ — ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﻮﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺭﺡ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺳﻴﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ؛ ﺍﺣﻜﻢ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺐ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ )ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫•‬‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻚ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ُ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺒﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬‫ﻃﻔﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ ٍﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ُﻋ ً‬‫ﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪173 AR‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﺮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻎ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗُﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻮﻛﺒﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪AR 174‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮَﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ً‬‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ً‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺐ‬‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪/®Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ )ﺹ‪.(139 .‬‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪/®Bluetooth‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ )ﺹ‪.(139 .‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻀﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ( ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍ ًء‬‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Olympus‬‬‫ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫•‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﺛﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻑء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺷﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪175 AR‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬‫‪ 2006/66/EC‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 176‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ً‬‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬‫ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻴﻚ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://consumer-service.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﻨﻪ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺷﻬﺮ‬‫ﻭﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ(‬‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫)ﺟـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺜﺎﻟﻴﻦ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﻗﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﺰﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE‬‬‫‪AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE‬‬‫‪PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE‬‬‫‪OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN‬‬‫‪COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC‬‬‫‪VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT‬‬‫‪WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED‬‬‫‪IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A‬‬‫‪VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE‬‬‫‪AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR‬‬‫‪SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.‬‬‫‪ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED‬‬‫‪FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE‬‬‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺒﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬‫ﻷﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Mac‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪Eye-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Apical‬‬‫ّ‬‫‪.Limited‬‬‫‪،Micro Four Thirds، Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭ ‪Four‬‬‫‪ Thirds‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS CORPORATION‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪.Alliance‬‬‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﻫﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ ،Bluetooth SIG‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS CORPORATION‬ﺗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ "ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪"DCF/‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(JEITA‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/‬‬‫‪digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm‬‬‫‪177 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬B‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬35 ..................................... Backlight HDR
102 ،64 ............................................ BGM
48 .....................................Bleach Bypass
132 ..........................................Bluetooth
54 ................................................... BULB
123 ................................ Bulb/Time Timer
95 ................................... Button Function

122 ....................................(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬8
103 .........................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬0131 ،124 ..............................# Slow Limit
124 ............................................... #+WB
131 ،124 ................................. # X-Sync.
151 ....................................... # RC Mode
101 ............................ (‫ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬a
119 .......................... (‫ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬s
129 ،107 ،101.................(‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬G
128 ،122 ........................ G/Info Settings
124 ............................................... w+F
73 .................................................. j/Y
103 ................................. (‫ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
119 ............................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬W
96 ،79 ....... (‫ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬k104 ....................................(‫ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬vً ‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬I
70 ...............(‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬115 ..................................(‫ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬R
124 ....................... W Keep Warm Color
96 ...............................................(‫ )ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬z
73 ........................... (Sequential Low) S
73 .......................... (Sequential High) T
122 .............................................. q Info
122 ....................................... G Settings
122 ...........................K Control Settings
30 .....................................(‫ )ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬u ‫ﺯﺭ‬
121 ،95 ،57...............................(‫ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬R ‫ﺯﺭ‬
104 ................................(Share Order) hC79 ......................... C-AF (Continuous AF)
80 .................. (‫ )ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬C-AF+TR
120 ........................................ Card Setup
126 ........................................Certification
62 .....................................................Clips
91 ........................................... Color Filter
124 ،93 .................................Color Space
123 ........................... Composite Settings
90 ............................................... Contrast
122 ................................. Control Settings
125 ............................. Copyright Settings
166 ،121 ............................ Custom Menu

D
121 ......................................Dial Function
111 ،68 ...................Digital Tele-converter
122 ................................... Displayed Grid
145 .................................................DPOF

E
125 .....................................Edit Filename
Elec. Zoom Speed
112 ....................................... Still image
114 .................................................... ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬Erase
103 ............................................ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬104 .......................................‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬120 ......................................... ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬123 ................................... Exposure Shift126 ................................................ Eye-FiA
51 ........................ (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬A
93 .......................................... AdobeRGB
45 ......................................AE Bracketing
127 ............................................ AEL/AFL
111 ،28 .............................. AF Illuminator
79 .............................................. AF Mode
114 .................................................... ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬60 ................................................ Art fade
47 .................................. (‫ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬ART

AR 178

89 ...............................................Metering
127 ،121 ................................... MF Assist
96 ...........................(Button Function) MF
79 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬MF
92 .............................. Monochrome Color
114 ............................................. Movie R
60 ........................... Movie Tele-converter
60 ............................................ Multi echo
40 ................................ Multiple Exposure
106 ،62 .......................................My Clips

125 .......................................... File Name
119 ............................................Firmware
122 ................................ Flicker reduction
46 .................................Focus Bracketing
79 .......................................... Focus Ring
120 ............................................... Format

G
91 .............................................Gradation

NH

123 ........................................ Noise Filter
123 .................................... .Noise Reduct

130 ،122 ......................................... HDMI
41 .....................................................HDR
94 ...................Highlight&Shadow Control

O
132 ...........................................OI.Palette
132 ............................................ OI.Share
132 .............................................OI.Track
60 ................................................ Old film
141 .......................... OLYMPUS Viewer 3
60 ..................................... One shot echoP
50 ......................................(‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬P
43 ............................................ Panorama
49 .........................................Partial Color
127 ،96 ........................................Peaking
122 .................................... Peaking Color
142 .......................................... PictBridge
111 ،76 ............................... Picture Mode149 ،131 ................................ Pixel Count
157 ،126 ............................ Pixel Mapping
166 ،115 .......................... Playback Menu
118 ...................................... Protect reset

R
115 .................................. RAW Data Edit
151 .................... RC Mode (# RC Mode)
114 ............................. Recording Volume
119 ........................................... Rec View
110 ................................................. Reset
121 ........................................ Reset Lens

179 ARF

I
81 ....................................... Image aspect
117 ................................... Image Overlay
87 ...................................Image Stabilizer
114 .................................................... ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬117 ..................... In-movie image capture
123 ..................................... ISO-Auto Set

J
116 .......................................... JPEG EditK
44 ..................... Keystone Compensation

L
126 ....................................... Level Adjust
26 ......................................... Level gauge
34 ........................................... Light Trails
123 ............................................Live Bulb
74 .......................................... Live control
31 ............................................ Live guide54 ،39 ..................................... LIVE TIME
122 ................................. Live View Boost
128 ،122 ....................................... LV-Info

M
53 ..................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬M
165 ،109 ..........................................Menu

‫‪S‬‬‫‪) S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪52 .................................‬‬‫‪) S-AF+MF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ‪80 ....‬‬‫‪) S-AF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‪79 ............................‬‬‫‪90 ............................................ Saturation‬‬‫‪) SCN‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ( ‪33 .........................................‬‬‫‪168 ،119 ............................... Setup Menu‬‬‫‪104 .......................................Share Order‬‬‫‪89 ........................................... Sharpness‬‬‫‪165 ،110 .......................... Shooting Menu‬‬‫‪110 .............................Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪110 .............................Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪42 .............................................. [♥] Silent‬‬‫‪79 ............................................. Single AF‬‬‫‪126 ،20 ........................................... Sleep‬‬‫‪93 ................................................... sRGB‬‬‫‪97 ..................................... Super Spot AF‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪112 ............................. Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫‪126 ........................ Touchscreen Settings‬‬‫‪130 ...................................................... TV‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪122 ......................................... USB Mode‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪114 ،82 ..............................Video Bit Rate‬‬‫‪114 ،82 ....................... Video Frame Rate‬‬‫‪165 ،114 ............................... Video Menu‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪124 .....................................................WB‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings‬‬‫‪139 ،138 ،134 ،119 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪27 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪101 ،100 ............................... Still image‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪103 ،100 ............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪101 ................................‬‬‫‪AR 180‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪149 ،131 ،124 ،81 ................ Still image‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪82 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪69 ...........................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪119 .....................................(W‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪140 ...........................................USB‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪142 .................................................‬‬‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪140 ...............................................‬‬‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪132 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪148 ،17 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )‪92 .................................. (i-Enhance‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪86 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪140 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪115 ،101 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪79 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪97 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪70 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪70 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪79 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ‪54 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪73 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪55 ،38 ..........................‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ‪112 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ّ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪137 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬‫)‪54 .......................... (BULB/LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪116 ...................................... JPEG‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪118 ....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪103 ...................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ‪66 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪142 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪150 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪71 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪73 .............................................‬‬‫ﺏ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪141 ........................................‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪148 .............................................. SD‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪120 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪125 .............................................Exif‬‬

‫ﺕ‬

‫ﻉ‬

‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪60 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪141 ....................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪104 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫‪105 ....................................... Still image‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪141 ........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‪54 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪57 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪103 ..................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪68 ........................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪88 ...........................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪50 .................................... (%‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪149 ............................................‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪149 .....................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪129 ،107 ،101...........................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪102 .........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪129 ،107 ،101.........................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪26 ...................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪24 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪98 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪107 ،56 ..............................‬‬‫ﺝ‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪81 .............................. (KK‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪82 ........................................ (nK‬‬‫ﺡ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪149 ،131 ،124....................... Still image‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪82 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪149 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪77 .............................................ISO‬‬‫ﺯ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪95 ....................................................Fn‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪109 ،99 ،26................................ INFO‬‬‫ﺱ‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ‪137 ............................................ GPS‬‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻄﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪65 .........................................‬‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪127 ،121 ،96...................‬‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪75 ......................‬‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪80 ....................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪20 ..........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ )‪96 ...............................................(z‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪149 ،131 ،81..............................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪137 ........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ‪27 ......................................‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪69 ....................................‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪78 .....................................‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪96 ،79 ....... (k‬‬‫ﻥ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪81 ...............................‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪136 ...........................‬‬

‫ﺵ‬

‫ﻭ‬

‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪15 .............................................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪151 ...............................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ‪151 ................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪37 .................................................AP‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪31 ................................... (B) AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪37 ...................................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪85 ،59 ..........................................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪79 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺹ‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪122 ............................................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪81 ............................................RAW‬‬‫ﺽ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪21 ...............................(X‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪119 ....................................‬‬‫‪181 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2018.01.‬‬‫‪WD401600‬‬